JP6762506B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like by using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to give a feeling of excitement by using a display effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-29956

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
Multiple display devices that can display the production design and
A game machine provided with a display control means for displaying the effect symbol on the display device.
The display control means temporarily stops the remaining one final stop effect symbol when the reach is formed by the two effect symbols, or the three jackpot effect symbols indicating that the jackpot has been achieved as the effect symbol. The first effect to be caused is executed, the second effect is executed to display as if the display is reduced and moved backward from the normal time following the first effect, and the second effect is subsequently expanded. A third effect is executed in which the display is displayed as if it has moved forward and the display is temporarily stopped so as to straddle the first display device and the second display device, and the third effect is followed by the third effect. The fourth effect of moving the effect symbol to the second display device and performing a fixed stop display is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation by an image display device 7. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation by an image display device 7. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation by an image display device 7. It is a figure for demonstrating operation by a movable accessory (board movable body 15). It is a figure for demonstrating operation by a movable accessory (board movable body 15). It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decorative pattern effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decorative pattern effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decorative pattern effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decorative pattern effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decorative pattern effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time index effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time index effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time index effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time index effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time index effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect A at the end of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect B at the end of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect C at the end of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect D at the end of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect E at the end of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prize-winning effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the prize-winning effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the prize-winning effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the prize-winning effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the prize-winning effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold image display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold image display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold image display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold image display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold image display effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the count effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the count effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the count effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the count effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the count effect E. It is a figure which shows the modification of the count effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the count effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the character object interlocking display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the accessory interlocking display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the accessory interlocking display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating image movement hold change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating image movement hold change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating image movement hold change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement hold change effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating operation correspondence operation display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation correspondence operation display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation correspondence operation display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation correspondence operation display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special look-ahead effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special look-ahead effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special look-ahead effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special look-ahead effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the special look-ahead effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect and the music information display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the dismemberment production. It is a figure for demonstrating the normal reach loss production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the normal reach loss production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol promotion display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol promotion display effect B.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the game machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding upward from the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), general winning It is provided with a mouth 29 (ordinary winning mouth 29), an out mouth 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3, and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 have an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image 9A and 9B are displayed. It has an image display area and a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as first hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as a second hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, the mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or the mode of other modes may be used. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like. .. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first special symbol is reserved. 2 It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable board movable body 15 (also referred to as a board movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is open than when it is closed, and when the movable member 23 is closed, the second starting port 21 may be entered. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probabilistic operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right hit". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize at the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning are calculated. , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of game states, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as (including) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the panel movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15, and controls the operation of the panel movable body 15 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute command-based lamp lighting control or operation control of the panel movable body 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when the human body comes into contact with the relay board 108. It may be connected.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5 (B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a hold ball number command, The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive in which drive data for driving the board movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. A data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be judged as "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6-127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table referenced to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is shown that the stop symbol (special figure stop symbol) of the special figure 2 is determined to be the "big hit symbol 1". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passing jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to 3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H" or "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is "open". It is shown that it is determined as "Pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 will be open even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a big hit to operate. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In the 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ) However, the high probability is the latent state (latent probability change state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, all the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the jackpots scheduled to pass V. That is, if a big hit is won by a lottery based on a prize at the second starting port 21 that can be entered by executing the electric support control described later, the jackpot will always pass V. In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply a "normal probability state (normal probability state). Non-high probability state, low probability state) ". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning a prize in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting the right side. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the second start port 21 is hit right to win the game ball. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. Numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 holding balls described later, and the first special drawing is based on the number of special figure 1 holding balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The number of special figure 2 hold balls is the number of second special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure hold. Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If no game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "miss". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is preliminarily determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is judged as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is judged as "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if there is a "loss" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether or not the time saving state is performed is performed by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to (the part of" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P15" to The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in Special FIG. From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). ”To“ P46 ”)). From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time saving counter in the low accuracy high base state, and "160" is set in the time saving counter in the high accuracy high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that was temporarily closed after opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the grand prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time to close the big winning opening That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the large winning opening. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" for the player, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to finish this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39 and is not. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened in the case of "long opening" when the second ball is won. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), in general, the second ball is won. The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "160" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets it. The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 160 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the pre-reading effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the change effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variation effect start process” is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V pass command, the sub RAM 94 holds the V pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The preliminary determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. There are multiple types of core production patterns that produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect that fades the preview image.

8. Operation of the Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the command before the end of the fluctuation does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image specified in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation of the image display device 7 FIGS. 46 to 48 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the image display device 7.
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A, second image display device 7B) during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.
As shown in FIG. 46, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B can be moved vertically and horizontally, or can be rotated, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first image display device 7A may be arranged so as to cover the second image display device 7B by moving from the upper side to the lower side. Further, as shown in FIG. 1 or 48, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are arranged adjacent to each other, and use two display areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The display effect is executed.

10. Operation of the movable accessory (board movable body 15) FIG. 49 or FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (board movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the board movable body 15 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like. The home position of the movable board 15 is in the position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, the board movable body 15 is deployed in front of the image display device 7 when it is movable from the home position. The deployment position of the movable board 15 is in the position shown in FIG. 50. When the board movable body 15 is deployed to the deployed position, the player can recognize that the accessory is completed. The effect control microcomputer 91 can control the movable board 15 from the home position to the deployed position. The board movable body 15 is basically in the home position, and is movably controlled to the deployed position by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate according to the display effect (game effect). When the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the deployed position, it is arranged on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b of the image display device 7 (on the front side of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b). It is arranged at a position overlapping a predetermined area of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b when viewed from a person. Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking a predetermined area of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b from the viewpoint of the player. When the board movable body 15 is in the home position, it is in a position that does not overlap with the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

11. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described.
As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed by the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and / or second image display device 7B). Specifically, a display effect example in which the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other and the second image display device 7B is arranged under the first image display device 7A. Is. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted.

Hereinafter, the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. This hold display decorative symbol effect is an effect related to the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

[Holding display decorative design production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decorative symbol effect A.
First, in the hold display decorative symbol effect A, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol is represented. Specifically, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed from the reach effect A across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Holding display decorative design production B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decorative symbol effect B.
First, in the hold display decorative symbol effect B, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Holding display decorative pattern production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decorative symbol effect C.
First, in the hold display decorative symbol effect C, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the reach effect C is executed. In this reach effect C, the decorative symbol in the reach state, the first hold icon 9A, the second hold icon 9C, and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively.

[Holding display decorative pattern production D]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decorative symbol effect D.
First, in the hold display decorative symbol effect D, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the reach effect C is executed. In this reach effect C, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7a move to the display screen 7b, and on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol in the reach state and the first The hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed.

[Holding display decorative pattern production E]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decorative symbol effect E.
First, in the hold display decorative symbol effect E, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the reach effect C is executed. In this reach effect C, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7b moves to the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol in the reach state, the first hold icon 9A, and the first hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. 2 Hold icon 9C is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold display decorative pattern effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 55, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, which improves the interest. Can be made to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 54, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen is displayed. In 7b, the hold icon and the variable display of the decorative symbol are realized. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is not changed and displayed on the display screen 7b, and the decorative symbol is changed on the display screen 7a. When the display is being performed, the hold icon is not displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 55, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen is displayed. The hold icon displayed on 7b is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 55, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen is displayed. The variable display of the decorative icon displayed in 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold display decorative pattern effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E are implemented as the hold display decorative symbol effects, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the present invention is not limited to this. An effect that combines a plurality of our patterns may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E. Further, the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E1-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a display accompanied by a hold display by the first display means.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a display accompanied by a symbol variation display by the second display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-1]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the hold display and the symbol variation display are performed by the first display means.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
In the first display effect, when the hold display is performed by the first display means, the symbol variation display is not performed by the first display means.
In the second display effect, when the symbol variation display is performed by the second display means, the hold display is not performed by the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the hold display performed by the first display means is displayed as the second display. The effect of moving to the means is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the symbol variation display performed by the second display means is displayed as the first display effect. The effect of moving to the display means is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

The fluctuation time index effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. This fluctuation time index effect is an effect related to the variation effect of the decorative pattern. The variable time index effects A to E may be executed during the time reduction.

[Fluctuating time index production A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time index effect A.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect A, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, the changing effect is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol continues to change on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. In the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A, the timer value represents the time until the end of the fluctuation, that is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is the time until the end of the fluctuation (time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol). ) Functions as an index. In the example of FIG. 56B, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is set to 30 seconds as an initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56C, the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the loss symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends on the display screen 7b, with the timer value of the variation end time suggestion image E2A (time until the end of the variation) is set to 0 seconds.

[Fluctuating time index production B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time index effect B.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect B, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the changing effect is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol continues to change on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance-up suggested image E2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Indicates the time until the end of the fluctuation (time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index showing the time until the end of the fluctuation. The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image E2AA, by moving the cursor image E2A1 from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, it represents from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

As the chance-up effect, one of a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect of the first aspect, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance-up effect of the second aspect, a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is performed. Is done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the loss symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Fluctuating time index production C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time index effect C.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect C, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the effect during fluctuation is executed. In this variable effect, a pseudo continuous effect is executed on the display screen 7a using a decorative pattern. In this pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream is expressed by the state that the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol and the decorative symbol 8C is a predetermined logo symbol.

It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the variable effect, during the reach effect, etc., and pretends that the variable effect is performed many times. As the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, an effect of repeating an effect of fluctuating and temporarily stopping a decorative symbol, an effect of repeating an effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined arrangement of decorative symbols, and an effect of temporarily stopping a predetermined logo. An effect of repeating the effect, or a display reminiscent of a pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo", and an effect of executing a variable effect of the decorative pattern may be performed.

Further, in the changing effect, the changing end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance-up suggested image E2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Indicates the time until the end of the fluctuation. That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index showing the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, a pseudo continuous effect as a chance-up effect may be executed. When the pseudo continuous effect (chance-up effect) is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up completed suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the pseudo continuous effect (chance-up effect) has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image E2AA, by moving the cursor image E2A1 from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, it represents from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect (chance-up effect) can be executed. There is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the loss symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Fluctuating time index production D]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time index effect D.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect D, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the changing effect A is executed. In this changing effect A, the decorative symbol continues to change on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance-up suggested image E2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Indicates the time until the end of the fluctuation. That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index showing the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image E2AA, by moving the cursor image E2A1 from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, it represents from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

As the chance-up effect, one of a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect of the first aspect, a background effect with a red background having a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance-up effect of the second aspect, a blue background with a relatively low jackpot expectation is performed. The background production is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the changing effect B is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol continues to change on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. In the change end time suggestion image E2A of the display screen 7b, the cursor image E2A1 of the changing effect A is changed to the cursor image E2A11. The cursor image E2A11 has a mode in which the cursor image is larger than the cursor image E2A1 of the effect A during fluctuation. The cursor image E2A11 is an image suggesting an increase in chance (an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high). Therefore, the changing effect B is a chance-up effect as compared with the changing effect A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the loss symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b. In this variation end effect, the cursor image returns to the cursor image E2A1.

[Fluctuating time index production E]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time index effect E.
In the fluctuation time index effect B, the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) were executed as image display devices, but in this fluctuation time index effect E, It is executed only on the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a). It should be noted that the fluctuation time index effect E may be executed only on the second image display device 7B.

First, in the fluctuation time index effect E, as shown in FIG. 60A, the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the changing effect is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol continues to change on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance-up suggested image E2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Indicates the time until the end of the fluctuation (time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index showing the time until the end of the fluctuation. The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image E2AA, by moving the cursor image E2A1 from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, it represents from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

As the chance-up effect, one of a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect of the first aspect, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance-up effect of the second aspect, a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is performed. Is done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the loss symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA. , Suggests that the change will end.
[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable time index effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, during the change of the decorative symbol (during the change of the special symbol), the time until the change ends (the time until the change of the special symbol stops). ) Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, the index representing the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops) includes the cursor image, and the cursor image Represents the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops) by moving to the end position of the meter image. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, an index indicating the time until the fluctuation is completed (time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped) is displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the decorative symbol. The production is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index showing the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). In the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A, the cursor image may be relatively small or large, and when the cursor image is large, the jackpot expectation is relatively high as compared with the case where the cursor image is small. It has a high composition. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.
Further, in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index showing the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). Therefore, in the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A, the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is displayed, suggesting that the chance-up effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, the variable time index effects A to E can be executed in a short time. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in a short time.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the fluctuation time index production.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of fluctuation time index productions A to E are implemented as the fluctuation time index production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and among A to E, the present invention is not limited to this. An effect that combines a plurality of patterns may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the fluctuation time index effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the fluctuation time index effects A to D. Further, the fluctuation time index effect effects A to D may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the fluctuation time index effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The 1 image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the cursor image E2A1 is changed to the cursor image E2A11 in the fluctuation time index effect D to increase the chance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an aspect of the chance-up effect, the color of the cursor image may be changed, or the cursor image may be changed to another character (such as a premium character).

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the fluctuation time index effects A to E, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is used to suggest the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the suspended fluctuations, the time until the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the predetermined hold (the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the predetermined hold stops) may be suggested.

[Aspect E2-1]
It is a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and a special symbol variable display means for variable display of special symbols.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of varyingly displaying a decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an index indicating the variation end time of the special symbol during the variation of the special symbol.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
The index includes a cursor display, and represents the fluctuation end time of the special symbol by moving the cursor display to the end position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2.
The first display effect is an effect including a pseudo continuous effect using the decorative pattern.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
The display mode of the index in the second display effect includes a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the display mode of the index suggests an increase in chance. In some cases, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case of the second display mode than in the case of the first display mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4.
The combination effect is performed when the game state is a time saving state.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative design effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65. This decorative pattern effect is an effect related to the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Decorative design production A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect A.
First, in the decorative design effect A, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol, and the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is shown. Further, in the reach effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are varied on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7b. In FIG. 61 (B), the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is doublet of 7 symbols. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 61 (B), the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also doublet of 7 symbols as in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

The decorative design effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65. This decorative pattern effect is an effect related to the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Decorative design production B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect B.
First, in the decorative design effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol, and the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is shown. Further, in the reach effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are varied on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. The jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is doublet of 7 symbols. Further, the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also the same as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and has 7 doublets.

[Decorative design production C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect C.
First, in the decorative design effect C, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol, and the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is shown. Further, in the reach effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are varied on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. The jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is doublet of 7 symbols. Further, the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R has 6 doublets, which are different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative design production D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect D.
First, in the decorative design effect D, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol, and the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is shown. Further, in the reach effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are varied on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the “6” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the jackpot notification effect A is executed. In this jackpot notification effect A, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7b, and the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 64 (B), the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is doublet of 6 symbols. Further, in the jackpot notification effect A, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the jackpot notification effect B is executed. In this jackpot notification effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are revariated on the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect B, the variable effect of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the jackpot notification effect C is executed. In this jackpot notification effect C, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped on the display screen 7b, and the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 64 (D), the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not 6 symbols but 7 doublets. Further, in the jackpot notification effect C, the variable effect of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is continued on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the jackpot notification effect D is executed. In this jackpot notification effect D, the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continuously shown on the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect D, the display screen 7a stops the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, and the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. In FIG. 64 (E), the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also doublet of 7 symbols as in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative design production E]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect E.
First, in the decorative design effect A, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol, the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is shown, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C and 9R are varied. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is further shown. In FIG. 65 (B), the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has 7 doublets, and the jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also the decorative symbol 8L. , 8C, 8R, 7 patterns are doublet.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative design effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 65, after the reach effect, in the jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are used to stop the jackpot symbol mode to notify the jackpot. When the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are used, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used and stopped in the jackpot symbol mode to notify the jackpot. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the design.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 65, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are changed, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are being changed. , The fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are re-variable to put the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R into the variable state. After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the design.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 65, in the case of a big hit, the fixed stop mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the fixed stop mode of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Are both modes that represent jackpots. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the stopping mode of the decorative symbol.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 62 and 64 to 65, the fixed stop mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the fixed stop mode of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Are both in the same mode. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the stopping mode of the decorative symbol.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the display effect by the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is performed on the display screen 7a, and the display effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed on the display screen 7a. And the configuration is performed on the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, different decorative patterns may be used depending on the display device, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative design effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of decorative design effects A to E are implemented as decorative design effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns A to E are used. The production may be performed by combining the patterns.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative design effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform decorative design effects A to D. Further, the hold display decorative symbol effects A to D may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the decorative design effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R may be displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are fixedly stopped as the decorative symbol effect, the configuration is such that the jackpot symbol mode is obtained. Is not limited to this, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are fixedly stopped, the out-of-order symbol mode may be used to notify the out-of-order.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D1-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of notifying the presence or absence of a big hit by changing the first symbol and stopping it in a predetermined symbol mode.
The second display effect is an effect of notifying the presence or absence of a big hit by varying a second symbol larger than the first symbol and stopping it in a predetermined symbol mode.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
In the combination effect, after the first symbol and the second symbol are changed, the fluctuation of the second symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation of the first symbol, and then the second symbol is changed. The first symbol and the second symbol are changed in a fluctuating state by re-variating the symbol, the second symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display, and then the first symbol is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
In the combination effect, in the case of a big hit, both the mode of the fixed stop display of the second symbol and the mode of the stop display of the first symbol are the modes representing the big hit.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D1-4]
A game machine according to aspect 2 or aspect.
In the combination effect, the mode of the fixed stop display of the second symbol and the mode of the stop display of the first symbol are the same modes.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first display effect is performed by the first display means.
The second display effect is performed by using the first display means and the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The mode change effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. This mode change effect is an effect related to a variable effect of a decorative pattern.

[Mode change effect A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect A.
First, in the mode change effect A, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for urging the player to operate the select button 68. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 66A, the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the mode select effect is executed. In this mode select effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the player uses the up key or down key of the select button image BTNS (hereinafter, these are also referred to as up and down keys). ) Is operated, the mode is switched, and a new mode is shown in the mode display image D2A of the display screen 7b. In the example of FIG. 66B, mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

The up and down keys of the select button image BTNS in the figure may be displayed in a predetermined manner so as to be differentiated from the left key or the right key (hereinafter, these are also referred to as left and right keys). For example, the left and right keys may be displayed in white and the up and down keys may be displayed prominently in red.

[Mode change effect B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect B.
First, in the mode change effect B, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for urging the player to operate the select button 68. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 67A, the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the mode select effect is executed. In this mode select effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the up and down keys of the select button image BTNS, and the display screen 7b In the mode display image D2A of the above, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 67 (B), the mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the button reach effect is executed. In this button reach effect, the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol is shown on the display screen 7a. Further, in this button reach effect, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b, and the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, in other words, is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63. Button reach effects include normal reach effects with relatively low jackpot expectations and super reach effects with relatively high jackpot expectations. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this button reach effect, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the accessory completion effect is executed. In this character completion effect, when the effect button 63 is operated by the player, the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position and is positioned in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the character is completed. Can be impressed on the player.

[Mode change effect C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect C.
First, in the mode change effect C, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for urging the player to operate the select button 68. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 68A, the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the mode select effect is executed. In this mode select effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the select button image BTNS, and the mode display on the display screen 7b. In image D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 68B, mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the volume change effect is executed. In this volume change effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in this volume change effect, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b, and the volume operation image D2B is displayed. The volume control image D2B represents the volume information corresponding to the current volume of the game machine 1. The volume information represented by the volume control image D2B changes when the player operates the left and right keys of the select button image BTNS.

[Mode change effect D]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect D.
First, in the mode change effect D, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for urging the player to operate the select button 68. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 69A, the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the mode select effect is executed. In this mode select effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the select button image BTNS, and the mode display on the display screen 7b. In image D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 69B, the mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the light amount changing effect is executed. In this light amount changing effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in this light amount changing effect, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b, and the light amount operation image D2C is displayed. The light amount manipulation image D2C represents the light amount information corresponding to the current light amount of the image display device 7. The light amount information represented by the light amount operation image D2C is changed by the player operating the left and right keys of the select button image BTNS.

[Mode change effect E]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect E.
First, in the mode change effect E, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for urging the player to operate the select button 68. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 70A, the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, the mode select effect is executed. In this mode select effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the up and down keys of the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image. In D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 70B, mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the mode change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 70, the select button image BTNS is displayed during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and one of a plurality of game modes is used. The mode display image D2A suggesting that the mode display image D2A is executed is displayed, and the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other. According to this configuration, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other during the change of the decorative pattern, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the button image BTN is displayed and the effect button is displayed by the player. When 63 is operated, the character completion effect is performed. According to this configuration, the button image BTN is displayed when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 70, the game mode is obtained by operating the select button image BTNS by the player within a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is changed. According to this configuration, the game mode is changed while the decorative pattern is changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the volume control image D2B is displayed and the volume control image D2B is displayed. Is displayed in association with the select button image BTNS. According to this configuration, the volume control image D2B is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the light amount operation image D2C is displayed and the light amount operation image D2C. Is displayed in association with the select button image BTNS. According to this configuration, since the light amount operation image D2C is displayed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the mode change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of mode change effect effects A to E are implemented as mode change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of A to E are used. The production may be performed by combining the patterns of.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the mode change effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform mode change effects A to D. Further, the mode change effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the mode change effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the mode change effect D, the volume control image D2B is displayed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and in the mode change effect E, the light amount operation image D2C is displayed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume control image D2B and the light amount control image D2C may be displayed in association with the select button image BTNS while the decorative pattern is fluctuating. In this case, the volume control image D2B and the light amount control image D2C may be selected by the effect button 63 so that the volume or the light amount can be changed. Further, the game mode, the volume, and the amount of light may be changed by pressing the select button 68.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timing at which the game mode can be changed by operating the select button 68 in the mode change effect may be performed within a certain time from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, or the change pattern. It may be different for each.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game mode is changed by the select button 68 in the mode change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode change effect may be changed by the effect button 63.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine including a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and a first operation unit that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an image of the first operation unit representing the first operation unit while the decorative symbol is changing.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a mode suggestion image suggesting that the decorative symbol is being executed in one of a plurality of types of game modes during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
Equipped with a second operation unit that can be operated by the player
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
In the third display effect, an image of the second operation unit representing the second operation unit is displayed during the reach effect.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the third display effect is performed, and the player operates the second operation unit. Then, the prescribed production is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
When the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the combination effect, the first operation unit is operated by the player within a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. , The game mode is changed from the game mode corresponding to the mode suggestion image displayed in the second display effect to another game mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying volume information indicating the volume during the game while the decorative symbol is fluctuating.
In the combination effect, when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the fourth display effect is performed, and the volume information is the first operation unit image. Displayed in association with
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying light amount information indicating the amount of light during the game while the decorative symbol is fluctuating.
In the combination effect, when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the fifth display effect is performed, and the light amount information is the first operation unit image. Displayed in association with
A game machine characterized by that.

The effects A to E at the end of the jackpot will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. This jackpot end effect is an effect at the end of the jackpot game.

[Direction A at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the effect A at the end of the jackpot.
First, in the jackpot end effect A, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three parts as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game on the display screen 7a, and mode A, mode B, or mode C is suggested in the divided areas. Display. Further, in the mode selection effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a warning effect is executed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image suggesting the mode after the big hit game, and specifically, is an image suggesting the mode selected by the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, the alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget his possession, and expresses the phrase "Be careful not to forget your possession!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the mode effect is executed. In this mode effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 71 (C), it is shown that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Direction B at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the effect B at the end of the jackpot.
First, in the jackpot end effect B, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three parts as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game on the display screen 7a, and mode A, mode B, or mode C is suggested in the divided areas. Display. Further, in the mode selection effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a warning effect is executed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image suggesting the mode after the big hit game, and specifically, is an image suggesting the mode selected by the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, the alerting image D3D is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3D is an image to alert the player not to have his property stolen, and expresses the phrase "Be careful not to have your property stolen!" ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the mode effect is executed. In this mode effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 72 (C), it is shown that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Direction C at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the effect C at the end of the jackpot.
First, in the jackpot end effect C, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three parts as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game on the display screen 7a, and mode A, mode B, or mode C is suggested in the divided areas. Display. Further, in the mode selection effect, the ally character CRA and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7b. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 and for selecting the mode displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73B, a warning effect is executed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image suggesting the mode after the big hit game, and specifically, is an image suggesting the mode selected by the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, the alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget his possession, and expresses the phrase "Be careful not to forget your possession!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 73C, the mode effect is executed. In this mode effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 73C, it is shown that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Direction D at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the effect D at the end of the jackpot.
First, in the jackpot end effect D, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three parts as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game on the display screen 7a, and mode A, mode B, or mode C is suggested in the divided areas. Display. Further, in the mode selection effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), a warning effect is executed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image suggesting the mode after the big hit game, and specifically, is an image suggesting the mode selected by the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, the alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget his possession, and expresses the phrase "Be careful not to forget your possession!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the maker logo effect is executed. In this maker logo effect, the maker logo image D3E is displayed on the display screen 7a. The maker logo image D3E represents the logo of the maker of the game machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined logo may be displayed. The predetermined logo may be a logo related to the game production of the game machine 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the mode effect is executed. In this mode effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 74 (D), it is shown that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Direction D at the end of the jackpot]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the effect E at the end of the jackpot.
This jackpot end effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
First, in the jackpot end effect E, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects can be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three as a display for selecting a mode after the jackpot game on the display screen 7a, and modes A, mode B, or mode C are suggested in the divided areas. Along with the display, the ally character CRA is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), a warning effect is executed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image suggesting the mode after the big hit game, and specifically, is an image suggesting the mode selected by the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, the alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7a. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget his possession, and expresses the phrase "Be careful not to forget your possession!".

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the mode effect is executed. In this mode effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 75 (C), it is shown that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect at the end of the big hit is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, after the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode after the big hit game is performed, the mode suggestion image is displayed and the player is presented with the mode suggestion image. It is configured to display a warning image that suggests a predetermined warning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the alert information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, the alert image is alert information for the player not to forget his / her possession, or the player is not stolen. It is an image that contains alert information for doing so. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the alert information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, after the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode after the jackpot game is performed, the mode suggestion image is displayed and the player is presented with the mode suggestion image. A warning image suggesting a predetermined warning is displayed, and then the production in the production mode selected in the mode selection production is performed. According to this configuration, the production in the production mode selected in the mode selection production is performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
As shown in FIG. 74, the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is configured to display a logo suggesting a manufacturer of the game machine after the effect of displaying a warning image is performed. According to this configuration, a logo suggesting the manufacturer is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, in the mode selection effect of the effect C at the end of the jackpot, a button suggesting that the player selects the effect mode after the jackpot game by using the effect button 63. The image BTN is displayed, and the player selects the effect mode after the big hit game by using the effect button 63. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect at the end of the jackpot.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of the jackpot end effect A to E are implemented as the jackpot end effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and among A to E, the present invention is not limited to this. The production may be performed by combining a plurality of patterns.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the effects A to D at the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the effects A to D at the end of the jackpot. Further, the effects A to D at the end of the jackpot may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot end effect A to D is performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The 1 image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot end effect D is performed, the maker logo image D3E is displayed in the maker logo effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined logo, for example, The logo of the maker who researched and developed the game machine 1 and the logo of the sales maker of the game machine 1 may be displayed. Further, the display timing of these logos may be before the attention-calling image is displayed, or may be displayed together with the caution-calling image.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a mode selection image for selecting an effect mode after a big hit game.
The second display effect is an effect that performs a display suggesting the effect mode.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a caution image suggesting a predetermined caution to the player.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The alert image is an image including alert information for preventing the player from forgetting his / her possession or alert information for preventing the player from being stolen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect mode.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the effect mode suggested in the second display effect is performed as the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo suggesting the manufacturer of the game machine.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by the player
The mode selection image of the first display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and suggests that the player selects the effect mode after the jackpot game by using the operation unit. This is an embodiment in which the player selects the effect mode after the jackpot game including the image by using the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by that.

The winning effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. This winning effect is an effect that is applied during a variable effect of a decorative pattern based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 or during a jackpot game.

[Prize production A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the winning effect A.
This winning effect A is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning opening effect, the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same on the display screen 7a is continued, and the general winning opening is entered on the display screen 7b based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 27. The sphere suggestion image D4A is displayed. The general winning opening suggestion image D4A is an image showing that a game ball has won (winning) in the general winning opening 27, and the phrase "Congratulations. You have won the general winning opening!" Is shown. ..

[Prize production B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the winning effect B.
This winning effect B is performed during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, the round suggestion image D4B is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the appearance of the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image suggesting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the wording "15R" is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning opening effect, the round suggestion image D4B is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the general winning opening suggestion image D4C is displayed on the display screen 7b based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 29. Will be done. The general winning opening suggestion image D4C is an image showing that a game ball has entered (winning) in the general winning opening 29 near the large winning opening, and is "Begin shiritori! Yogurt ..." to ". The wording "yo" is shown. That is, in this general winning opening production, the shiritori game with the players is started by entering the game ball into the general winning opening 29.

[Prize production C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the winning effect C.
This winning effect C is performed during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, the round suggestion image D4B is displayed and the ball ejection suggestion image D4D is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the jackpot game effect, the appearance of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image suggesting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the wording "15R" is shown. The ball ejection suggestion image D4D is an image suggesting the number of game balls paid out to the player during the jackpot (the ball ejected by the player during the jackpot, hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot ball).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning opening effect, the round suggestion image D4B is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot suggestion image D4D suggests on the display screen 7b based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 29. The number of balls is displayed increased by the number of payout balls corresponding to the general winning opening 29. Further, in the general winning opening effect, the appearance of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Prize production D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the winning effect D.
This winning effect D is performed during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, the round suggestion image D4B is displayed and the ball ejection suggestion image D4D is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the jackpot game effect, the appearance of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image suggesting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the wording "15R" is shown. The ball ejection suggestion image D4D is an image suggesting the number of jackpot balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning opening effect, the round suggestion image D4B is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot suggestion image D4D suggests on the display screen 7b based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 29. The number of balls is displayed increased by the number of payout balls corresponding to the general winning opening 29. Further, in the general winning opening production, the game state suggestion image D4E is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 29. The game state suggestion image D4E is an image suggesting the game state after the big hit game, and the phrase "<next notice> probability fluctuation has arrived !!" is shown. That is, in this general winning opening production, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 29, a display is performed to add a big hit ball, and a display suggesting a game state after the big hit game is displayed.

[Prize production E]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning effect E.
This prize-winning effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
This winning effect E is performed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning opening effect, the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same on the display screen 7a is continued, and the general winning opening entry suggestion image D4A is based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 27. Is displayed. The general winning opening suggestion image D4A is an image showing that a game ball has won (winning) in the general winning opening 27, and the phrase "Congratulations. You have won the general winning opening!" Is shown. ..

The decorative pattern variation effect (reach effect) or the jackpot game effect is an effect performed based on winning a prize in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. Further, the general winning opening 29 is arranged adjacent to the position closer to the first major winning opening 30 and 35 than the general winning opening 27. The general winning opening 27 is arranged adjacent to the position closer to the first starting opening 20 than the general winning opening 29.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning pattern production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80, a display effect (variation effect of a decorative symbol) performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. Or, when the jackpot game production) is being performed, the general winning opening production is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the jackpot lottery result based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 is performed when a jackpot is obtained. When the display effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) is performed, the general winning opening effect is performed. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 79, a display effect (variation effect of decorative symbols) is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. Or, when the jackpot game production) is being performed, an image (ball ejection suggestion image D4D) suggesting the jackpot output obtained in the jackpot game is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 29. It is configured to do. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, a display effect (variation effect of decorative symbol or jackpot game) performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. When the production) is being performed, an image suggesting a game state (game state suggestion image D4E) is displayed based on the fact that the game ball enters the general winning opening 29. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the general winning opening 29 is arranged so as to be closer to the first major winning opening 30 than the first starting opening 20. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the winning effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of winning effects A to E are implemented as the winning effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E can be used. You may try to carry out the combined production.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the winning effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the winning effects A to E. Further, the winning effects A to D may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the winning effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first image. The display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the winning effects A and E, the general winning opening suggestion image D4A that directly suggests winning the general winning opening is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. An image that indirectly suggests winning a prize in the general winning opening may be displayed instead of the one. For example, as an image that indirectly suggests a prize in the general winning opening, an image that suggests the number of balls to be paid out for the winning of the general winning opening may be displayed when the general winning opening is won. Further, as an image that indirectly suggests winning the general winning opening, an image that starts a predetermined effect when the general winning opening is won may be displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the winning effect B, the general winning opening suggestion image D4C suggesting the start of shiritori is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other An image suggesting the start of the effect may be displayed. For example, as an image suggesting the start of another effect, an image introducing a character, an image introducing playability, an image introducing a reach effect, an image suggesting the degree of expectation of a look-ahead effect, and a jackpot of the fluctuation. An image or the like suggesting the degree of expectation may be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D4-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, a starting port that triggers a big hit lottery, and a general winning opening different from the starting port.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect performed based on the entry of a game ball into the start port.
The second display effect is a display effect performed based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The first display effect includes a display effect during a jackpot game performed when the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a jackpot.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to the second aspect.
The second display effect is a display effect that displays an image suggesting a jackpot output ball acquired in the jackpot game based on the game ball entering the general winning opening.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
The second display effect is a display effect that displays an image suggesting a game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the general winning opening.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
Equipped with a big prize opening that allows a game ball to win during a big hit game
The general winning opening is arranged closer to the large winning opening than the starting opening.
A game machine characterized by that.

The reserved image display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. The hold image display effect is performed in parallel with the variable effect of the decorative pattern. In particular, when the game state after the big hit is the probability change game state, it is performed in parallel with the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

[Hold image display effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image display effect A.
First, in the reserved image display effect A, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, the effect symbol is changed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The hold image 9A shows the number of stored memories of the first special figure hold, and is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn inside the heart. On the other hand, the reserved image 9B shows the number of stored second special figure reservations, and is a single heart image. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the fluctuation, and if it is a single heart image, it shows the digestion of the second special figure hold, and if it is a double heart image, it shows the digestion of the first special figure hold. If both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are present, the second special figure hold is preferentially digested. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7b, the message "94 times remaining" is displayed, indicating that the probability variation game state continues to change by 94.

Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbol, and each time the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, the display of "remaining XX times" is reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the first image display effect is executed until "the remaining 50 times" is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the second image display effect (1) is executed. In the second image display effect (1), as in the first image display effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. In addition, "remaining XX times" is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7b.

The second image display effect (1) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the change of the effect symbol is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed. At this timing, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9B change to white circle images. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state.

[Hold image display effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image display effect B.
First, in the reserved image display effect B, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, the effect symbol is changed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The hold image 9A shows the number of stored memories of the first special figure hold, and is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn inside the heart. On the other hand, the reserved image 9B shows the number of stored second special figure reservations, and is a single heart image. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the fluctuation, and if it is a single heart image, it shows the digestion of the second special figure hold, and if it is a double heart image, it shows the digestion of the first special figure hold. If both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are present, the second special figure hold is preferentially digested. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7b, the message "94 times remaining" is displayed, indicating that the probability variation game state continues to change by 94.

Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbol, and each time the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, the display of "remaining XX times" is reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the first image display effect is executed until "the remaining 50 times" is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the second image display effect (2) is executed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In addition, "remaining XX times" is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect symbol is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9B change to white circle images. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state.

[Hold image display effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image display effect C.
First, in the reserved image display effect B, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, a variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserved image 9A shows the stored numbers of both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold. The image showing the number of stored memories of the first special figure hold is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn inside the heart. On the other hand, the image showing the number of stored second special figures is a single heart image. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the fluctuation, and if it is a single heart image, it shows the digestion of the second special figure hold, and if it is a double heart image, it shows the digestion of the first special figure hold. Holds are digested in the order of entry. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7b, the message "94 times remaining" is displayed, indicating that the probability variation game state continues to change by 94.

Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbol, and each time the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, the display of "remaining XX times" is reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first image display effect is executed until "the remaining 50 times" is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the second image display effect (1) is executed. In the second image display effect (1), as in the first image display effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. In addition, "remaining XX times" is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7b.

The second image display effect (1) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect symbol is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7b. At this timing, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C change to white circle images. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. Then, at this time, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the first special figure is on hold or the second special figure is on hold.

[Hold image display effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image display effect D.
First, in the reserved image display effect D, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, a variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserved image 9A shows the stored numbers of both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold. The image showing the number of stored memories of the first special figure hold is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn inside the heart. On the other hand, the image showing the number of stored second special figures is a single heart image. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the fluctuation, and if it is a single heart image, it shows the digestion of the second special figure hold, and if it is a double heart image, it shows the digestion of the first special figure hold. Holds are digested in the order of entry. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7b, the message "94 times remaining" is displayed, indicating that the probability variation game state continues to change by 94.

Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbol, and each time the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, the display of "remaining XX times" is reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the first image display effect is executed until "the remaining 50 times" is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the second image display effect (2) is executed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7A. In addition, "remaining XX times" is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect symbol is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C change to white circle images. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. Then, at this time, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the first special figure is on hold or the second special figure is on hold.

[Hold image display effect E]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the reserved image display effect E.
First, in the reserved image display effect D, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, a variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserved image 9A shows the stored numbers of both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold. Both the image showing the stored number of the first special figure hold and the image showing the stored number of the second special figure hold are single heart images. Therefore, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are indistinguishable. Holds are digested in the order of entry. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7b, the message "94 times remaining" is displayed, indicating that the probability variation game state continues to change by 94.

Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbol, and each time the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, the display of "remaining XX times" is reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the first image display effect is executed until "the remaining 50 times" is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the second image display effect (2) is executed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7A. In addition, "remaining XX times" is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect symbol is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C change to white circle images. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. Then, at this time, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the first special figure is on hold or the second special figure is on hold.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 85, the reserved images 9A and 9B are different depending on the number of rotations of the change in the probabilistic game state. According to this configuration, it is possible to add sharpness to the probabilistic game state and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first image display effect is performed and the reserved image is displayed as a heart image as the first display mode when the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, at the time of the fluctuation from the 51st rotation to the 100th rotation after the end of the big hit, the second image display effect is performed, and the reserved image is displayed as a white circle image as the second display mode. According to this configuration, the probabilistic game state can be distinguished into the first half and the second half, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the first special figure is made so that the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold can be distinguished only in the first image display effect. The number of stored memories on hold was displayed as a double heart image, and the number of stored memories on the second special figure was displayed as a single heart image. As a result, the taste of the reserved image differs greatly between the first half and the second half of the probabilistic game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82, 84 and 85, in the first image display effect, the reserved image of the first display mode is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. On the other hand, in the second image display device, the reserved image of the second display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the taste of the reserved image differs greatly between the first half and the second half of the probabilistic game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b of the image display devices 7A and 7B on the side where the reserved image is not displayed are used to display the variation of the effect symbol. According to this configuration, the display of the reserved image becomes easy to understand and conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
An example of modification in this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second image display effect, the reserved images 9A and 9B are the same images as the reserved images 9A and 9B in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, a reserved image different from the normal gaming state may be adopted.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold image is changed with the fluctuation from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the jackpot as the first period and the fluctuation from the 51st rotation to the 100th rotation as the second period. It was. On the other hand, the reserved image may be changed in three or more periods.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b of the image display devices 7A and 7B on the side where the reserved image is not displayed are used to display the variation of the effect symbol. On the other hand, on the other side of the display screens 7a and 7b, the holding image may be displayed and the effect symbol may be variablely displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D5-1]
A display device that can notify the number of held images by the number of displayed images on hold,
A gaming machine including a display control means for controlling the display of the reserved image on the display device.
When the gaming state is controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the display control means is characterized in that the display of the reserved image is changed according to the fluctuating rotation speed in the advantageous gaming state. Machine.

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the reserved image is displayed in the first display mode in the first period and displayed in the second display mode in the second period.

[Aspect D5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-2.
In either the first display mode or the second display mode, the display control means has a number of holds due to ball entry from the first entry port and a number of hold due to entry from the second entry port. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a pending image that can be distinguished from.

[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3.
Further, it is equipped with a plurality of the display devices.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the display in the first display mode is performed by the first display device and the display in the second display mode is performed by the second display device.

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-4.
A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display of an effect symbol is performed on a display device different from the display device on which the reserved image is displayed by the display control means.

The count effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. This count effect is an effect related to the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

[Count production A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the count effect A.
This count effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the movable body 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The display of the countdown display image C1A is continued in the display area that does not overlap with. In FIG. 86 (C), the countdown display image C1A shows that the countdown has progressed to “1”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in the display area. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image suggesting a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as a “big hit”.

[Count production B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the count effect B.
This count effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the game is played on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the person. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the button image BTN, and the button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes "1", and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, in other words, is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image suggesting a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as a “big hit”.

[Count production C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the count effect C.
This count effect C is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the game is played on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the person. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The button press promotion image C1C is displayed in the display area, and the button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes "1", and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, in other words, is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the board movable body 15 rotates in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification image C1B is displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image suggesting a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as a “big hit”.

[Count production D]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the count effect D.
This count effect D is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89B, the countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the movable body 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The button press promotion image C1C is displayed in the display area, and the button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes "1", and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, in other words, is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the board movable body 15 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) while the board movable body 15 is continuously arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to generate a jackpot. Notify the player. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification image C1B is displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image suggesting a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as a “big hit”.

[Count production E]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the count effect E.
In this count effect E, only the display screen 7a is used without using the display screen 7b.
This count effect E is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and does not overlap with the board movable body 15 on the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and on the display screen 7a, the countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. The display continues. In FIG. 90 (C), the countdown display image C1A shows that the countdown has progressed to "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and on the display screen 7a, the jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. Is displayed. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image suggesting a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as a “big hit”.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 90, the board movable body 15 is moved from the home position to the deployed position, and the board movable body is moved in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. An effect of stopping 15 is performed, and at that time, a countdown display image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. According to this configuration, the effect of the board movable body 15 and the countdown effect can be enjoyed at the same time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 90, the board movable body 15 is produced, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. When the countdown display image is displayed in the display area and the countdown display reaches a predetermined value, a jackpot notification effect is performed. According to this configuration, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 89, the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect, and when the player operates the effect button 63, the board is movable in the jackpot notification effect. The body 15 is configured to be changed by rotating or changing its color. According to this configuration, the mode of the movable board 15 is changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect, and when the player operates the effect button 63, the board movable body 15 is displayed in the jackpot notification effect. It is configured to change the color. According to this configuration, the color of the movable board 15 changes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the board movable body 15 is moved from the home position to the deployed position, and a predetermined region formed on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is formed. The effect of stopping the board movable body 15 in front is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the board movable body 15 arranged in front of the two display devices, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the count effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of count effects A to E are implemented as count effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E can be used. You may try to carry out the combined production.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the count effects A to D, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E. Further, the counting effects A to D may be performed with the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the count effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first image. The display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the count effects A to E are performed, the countdown effect is shifted to the jackpot notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the countdown effect, the shift may be made to shift to the loss notification effect for notifying the loss.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the count effects A to D, when the board movable body 15 moves to the deployed position, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. And on the display screen 7b, the countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 as seen from the player, and the display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 as seen by the player is Two of each are formed, and the two display areas are each formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, one display area or three or more display areas that do not overlap with the board movable body 15 from the viewpoint of the player may be formed. Alternatively, the display area thus formed may be formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively, or may be formed by either the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

[Modification 6]
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a modified example of the count effect. In the count effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the countdown effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 91, the count-up effect may be performed by the count effect. In this case, in the count-up effect, when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, the jackpot notification effect may be started.

[Modification 7]
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modified example of the count effect. In the count effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the countdown reaches 1 or when the PUSH display appears, the process shifts to the jackpot notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 92, even if the countdown is in the middle, the jackpot notification effect may be started.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, a movable accessory, and an operation unit that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of moving the movable accessory from a first position to a second position and performing the effect of the movable accessory in front of the first region of the display means. ,
The second display effect is a timer display effect that executes a timer display in a second area adjacent to the first area of the display means.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an operation display effect that displays an image of the operation unit representing the operation unit in the second area of the display means.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, when the timer value of the timer display in the second display effect reaches a predetermined value, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to the second aspect.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the mode of the movable accessory from the first mode to the second mode.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the player operates the operation unit after the third display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to the third aspect.
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the color of the movable accessory from the first color to the second color.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first region of the display means is formed by the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

The accessory-linked display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. This accessory-linked display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, a reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory-linked display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Characteristic interlocking display production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked display effect A. In the accessory-linked display effect A, first, the left-side accessory-linked display effect of FIG. 93 (A) is executed. In this left-sided accessory interlocking display effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

In this state, a light emitting effect is performed in which one of the left sides (left movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Is displayed, and a light emitting image S1 representing a streak of light is configured as a whole. That is, the light emitting image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The light emitting image S1 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the left movable accessory.

Next, the right-hand side accessory interlocking display effect shown in FIG. 93 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emitting effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A constitutes a light emitting image S2 representing a streak of light. The light emitting image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7b. The light emitting image S2 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the right movable accessory. The right movable accessory performs a light emitting effect while covering a part of the first image display device 7A.

[Characteristic interlocking display production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked display effect B. The accessory-linked display effect B is different from the accessory-linked display effect A in FIG. 93 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the display content of the display effect. .. In the left side accessory interlocking display effect of FIG. 94 (A), the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advance position (deployment position) as in the accessory interlocking display effect A of FIG. 93. .. The first image display device 7A is located on the left side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the right side. The board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

In this state, a light emitting effect is performed in which one of the left sides (left movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Is displayed, and a light emitting image S1 representing a streak of light is configured as a whole. That is, the light emitting image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The light emitting image S1 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the left movable accessory.

Next, the right-hand side accessory interlocking display effect shown in FIG. 94 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emitting effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B constitutes a light emitting image S2 representing a streak of light. The light emitting image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The light emitting image S2 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the right movable accessory. The right movable accessory performs a light emitting effect while covering a part of the first image display device 7A.

[Characteristic interlocking display production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked display effect C. Compared with the character-linked display effect A of FIG. 93, the character-linked display effect C is different from the effect content of the board movable accessory 15 and the display content of the display effect. In the left side accessory interlocking display effect of FIG. 95 (A), the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advance position (deployment position) as in the accessory interlocking display effect A of FIG. 93. .. Further, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

In this state, a movement effect is performed in which one of the left sides (left movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) moves up and down. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the vertical movement effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Is displayed, and a specific image S1 representing a star-shaped figure as a whole is configured. That is, the specific image (star-shaped graphic image) S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The specific image S1 may move up and down on the display screens 7a and 7b.

Next, the right-hand side accessory interlocking display effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, a movement effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right movable accessory) of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) moves left and right. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the left / right movement effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, the specific image S2 representing the character is configured by the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The specific image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image S2 may move left and right on the display screens 7a and 7b. The right movable accessory executes the movement effect while covering a part of the first image display device 7A.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the accessory-linked display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, when the left movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 is executing the light emitting effect, the first image display device 7A and the second image When the specific image S1 (for example, a light emitting image) is displayed on both of the display devices 7B and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 is executing the light emitting effect, the specific image S2 is displayed on the first image display device 7A. (For example, a light emitting image) is displayed, and the specific image S2 is not displayed on the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, when the board movable accessory 15 (right movable accessory) is performing a specific effect (light emitting effect, moving effect, etc.), It covers a part of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, when the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is performing a specific effect (light emitting effect, moving effect, etc.), It covers a part of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the specific effect of the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is a light emitting effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the specific effect of the board movable accessory 15 (right movable accessory) is a light emitting effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 are configured to be movable, respectively. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the accessory-linked display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is assumed that the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 are configured to be movable. However, the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 may be configured so that at least one of them cannot move.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific images S1 and S2 are light emitting images and character images. However, the specific objects represented by the specific images S1 and S2 mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures and characters. , Symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. are also included.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A second display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
The first character that can perform the first production,
It is a game machine equipped with a second accessory capable of performing a second effect.
When the first accessory is performing the first effect, the first image is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means.
When the second accessory is performing the second effect, the second image is displayed on the first display means, and the second image is displayed on the second display means. Not done,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The second accessory covers a part of the first display means when the second effect is being executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The first accessory covers a part of the first display means when performing the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The first effect is a light emission effect in which the first accessory emits light.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The second effect is a light emission effect in which the second accessory emits light.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The first display means and the second display means are configured to be movable.
A game machine characterized by that.

The image movement hold change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This image movement hold change effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image movement hold change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Image movement hold change effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect A. In the image movement hold change effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 96 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. There is. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed with the upper right side of the star-shaped figure framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, is displayed as a whole, becomes a star-shaped figure (star-shaped image), and contacts the lower end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of a specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2. The star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction as a whole.

Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 96 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the four reserved images 9A (reserved image IM3) corresponds to the star image. Changes to. That is, at least one of the shape, color, motion, etc. of the reserved image IM3 changes to the one corresponding to the shape, color, motion, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement hold change effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect B. The image movement hold change effect B is different from the image move hold change effect A in FIG. 96 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. In the image appearance effect of FIG. 97 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the right side, the second image display device 7B is located on the left side, and the hold image 9A and the hold digestion image 9C are below the second image display device 7B. It is displayed. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed with the upper right side of the star-shaped figure framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, is displayed as a whole, becomes a star-shaped figure, and comes into contact with the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 97 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the right end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the left side of a specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2. The star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction as a whole.

Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 97 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the four reserved images 9A (reserved image IM3) corresponds to the star image. Changes to. That is, at least one of the shape, color, motion, etc. of the reserved image IM3 changes to the one corresponding to the shape, color, motion, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement hold change effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect C. Compared with the image movement hold change effect A of FIG. 96, the image movement hold change effect C has a point where a decorative pattern is displayed on the first image display device 7A and a movable accessory in front of the first image display device 7A. Is different in that it is located. Here, it is assumed that the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advance position (deployment position). In the image appearance effect of FIG. 98 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and the board is in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The movable accessory 15 is located. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed below the first image display device 7A, and reserved images 9A, 9B, and reserved digestion image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed with the upper right side of the star-shaped figure framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. A part of the image IM1 becomes difficult to see due to the movable board 15.

Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction and comes into contact with the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is also framed out at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. Further, the board movable accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image is in a state where it is difficult to see due to the board movable accessory 15. The star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and as shown in FIG. 98C, moves further to the lower left as a whole.

Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 98 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star-shaped image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the reserved images 9A (holding image IM3) changes to a mode corresponding to the star-shaped image. To do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, motion, etc. of the reserved image IM3 changes to the one corresponding to the shape, color, motion, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, one shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement hold change effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect D. The image movement hold change effect D is a point in which the size of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure) represented by the image IM1 or the image IM2 changes as compared with the image move hold change effect A of FIG. Is different. A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

In the image appearance effect of FIG. 99A, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed with the upper right side of the star-shaped figure framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left.

Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 99 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 (star-shaped figure) appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a becomes larger while moving in the lower left direction, and comes into contact with the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the star-shaped figure is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is also framed out at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. The star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and as shown in FIG. 99 (C), moves in the lower left direction while becoming larger. ..

Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 99 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star-shaped image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the reserved images 9A (holding image IM3) changes to a mode corresponding to the star-shaped image. To do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, motion, etc. of the reserved image IM3 changes to the one corresponding to the shape, color, motion, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image movement hold change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, a first effect in which a star-shaped graphic image (specific image) is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and a first effect of the first effect. Later, a second effect in which a star-shaped graphic image is displayed across both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B, and after the second effect, on the second image display device 7B. It is configured to be feasible to perform a third effect in which the displayed reserved image IM3 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, in the first effect, a specific image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, in the third effect, the reserved image IM3 changes to a shape corresponding to a specific image (here, a star-shaped image). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the specific image (here, the star-shaped image) displayed in the second effect is larger than the specific image displayed in the first effect. Is big. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 98, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a board movable accessory 15 located in front of at least a part of a specific image (here, a star-shaped image) in the second effect. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the image movement hold change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of reserved images that change to the mode corresponding to the specific image is one, but the number of reserved images that change to the corresponding mode may be plural. In addition, the reserved image that changes to the corresponding mode may change other than the shape. For example, it may change to the same color as the specific image, or may operate in the same manner as the specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the specific image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the reserved image is changed to a mode corresponding to the specific image. However, the reserved image may be changed in a mode corresponding to the specific image before the specific image straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, or may be changed at the same time as the specific image is straddled.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the board movable accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image is in a state where it is difficult to see due to the board movable accessory 15. There is. However, the board movable accessory 15 may be located in front of the entire star-shaped image, and the entire star-shaped image may be difficult to see due to the board movable accessory 15.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
After the first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display means and the first effect, the specific image straddles both the first display means and the second display means. A second effect to be displayed and a third effect in which the hold icon displayed on the second display means changes after the second effect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine described in B1-1.
The specific image is an image representing a specific object, and is
In the first effect, an image corresponding to a part of the specific object is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to B1-1 or B1-2.
In the third effect, the hold icon changes to a shape corresponding to the specific image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-3.
The specific image displayed in the second effect is larger in size than the specific image displayed in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-4.
In the first effect, a decorative pattern is displayed on the first display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-5 is further described.
It includes an accessory located in front of at least a part of the specific image displayed in the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation-corresponding operation display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. This operation-corresponding operation display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation corresponding operation display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Operation corresponding operation display effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining an operation-corresponding operation display effect A. In the operation-corresponding operation display effect A, first, the vertical vibration effect of FIG. 100 (A) is executed. In the vertical vibration effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. On the first image display device 7A, a specific image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged are displayed. On the second image display device 7B, an operation unit image (button image) BN showing the appearance of the effect button 63 and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting an operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of "continuous hits !!!". The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image suggesting the operation method of the operation means (here, the effect button 63).

In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. This vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the operation amount of the effect button 63 by the player. The color of the button image BN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the specific image IM1 slowly moves upward. This upward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a continues to move in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 is further changed in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the increase in the operation amount of the effect button 63 by the player. The color of the button image BN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the specific image IM1 slowly moves downward. This downward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a further continues to move in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 is further changed in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the increase in the operation amount of the effect button 63 by the player. The color of the button image BN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 100 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the vertical direction.

[Operation corresponding operation display effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining an operation-corresponding operation display effect B. The operation-corresponding operation display effect B is different from the operation-corresponding operation display effect A of FIG. 100 in the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. In the left-right swing effect of FIG. 101 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. On the first image display device 7A, a specific image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged are displayed. On the second image display device 7B, a handle image HD (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the handle 60 and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting an operation method of the handle 60 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of "Turn the steering wheel !!!". The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image suggesting the operation method of the operation means (here, the handle 60).

In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. Specifically, the specific image IM1 reciprocates in the circumferential direction of the semicircle. This semicircumferential direction corresponds to the operating direction of the handle 60. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player. The color of the handle image HD changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B) and 101 (C), the specific image IM1 rotates in the left-right direction while moving in the semicircumferential direction. This rotation in the left-right direction also corresponds to the operation direction of the handle 60. In this way, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. As the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player increases, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular figure. The color of the handle image HD changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 101 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the handle image HD changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the semicircumferential direction.

[Operation corresponding operation display effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining an operation-corresponding operation display effect C. The operation-corresponding operation display effect C is different from the operation-corresponding operation display effect A of FIG. 100 in the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. Here, it is assumed that the game machine 1 is provided with a lever that can be operated by the player. This lever may be installed at any place in the game machine 1. Further, this lever is electrically connected to the sub control board 90, and it is assumed that the sub control board 90 can detect the operation of the lever by the player.

In the left-right swing effect of FIG. 102 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. On the first image display device 7A, a specific image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a sword) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged are displayed. On the second image display device 7B, a lever image LV (operation unit image) showing the appearance of the lever and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting the operation method of the lever are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of "pull the lever !!!". The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image that suggests the operation method of the operation means (here, the lever).

In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the lever. Specifically, the specific image IM1 swings left and right. This left-right swing corresponds to the operating direction of the lever. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the lever by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the amount of operation of the lever by the player. The color of the lever image LV changes according to the operation of the lever by the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 102 (B) and 102 (C), the specific image IM1 slowly swings left and right. As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the tilt of the specific image IM1 to the left corresponds to the operating direction of the lever. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the tilting of the specific image IM1 to the right also corresponds to the operating direction of the lever. In this way, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operating directions of the levers. As the amount of lever operation by the player increases, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular figure. The shape of the lever image LV changes so as to alternately represent a state in which the lever is pulled and a state in which the lever is returned to its original position. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the lever image LV changes to the exploding mode. A suggestion image IM3 suggesting the state of the meter is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is configured as a character image of "MAX !!!".

[Operation corresponding operation display effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining an operation-corresponding operation display effect D. In the operation-compatible operation display effect D, as compared with the operation-compatible operation display effect A of FIG. 100, a point where a movable accessory is located in front of the first image display device 7A and a character image as a part of the operation unit image The difference is that they overlap. Here, it is assumed that the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advance position (deployment position).

In the vertical vibration effect of FIG. 103 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and the board is in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The movable accessory 15 is located. On the first image display device 7A, a specific image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged are displayed. A part of the meter image IM2 becomes difficult to see due to the movable panel 15. The second image display device 7B includes an operation unit image (button image) BN showing the appearance of the effect button 63, a character image CA displayed so as to cover a part of the button image BN, and an operation method of the effect button 63. The operation method suggestion image RD suggesting is displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of "continuous hits !!!". The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image suggesting the operation method of the operation means (here, the effect button 63).

In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. This vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the operation amount of the effect button 63 by the player. The color of the button image BN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 103 (B) and 103 (C), the new road in the vertical direction of the specific image IM1 continues. The color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 is further changed in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the increase in the operation amount of the effect button 63 by the player. The color of the button image BN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 103 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the vertical direction.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation-corresponding operation display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, an operation unit image (for example, a button image BN, a handle image HD, a lever image LV) is displayed on the second image display device 7B, and the first image is displayed. With the specific image IM1 displayed on the image display device 7A, the operation direction corresponding effect is performed in which the specific image IM1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 103, the operation unit image represents the appearance of the effect button 63 button, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image IM1 represents the operation direction of the button. Move (up and down). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the meter image IM2 is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the meter is operated according to the operation of the operation unit by the player. The image IM2 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the operation method suggestion image RD is displayed on the second image display device 7B in the operation direction corresponding effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the character image CA is displayed on the first image display device 7A in the operation direction corresponding effect. This character image CA is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the board movable accessory 15 is located in front of at least a part of the first image display device 7A when the operation direction corresponding effect is executed. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation corresponding operation display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the vertical direction is exemplified as the operation direction of the button image BN, but the left-right direction and the diagonal direction also correspond to the operation direction of the button. The movement corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit by the specific image does not have to be repeated. That is, the movement corresponding to the operation direction may be performed only once.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image is displayed, but the meter image may not be displayed. Further, the operation method suggestion image RD may not be displayed either. Further, the character image CA may not be displayed either.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image IM2 represents a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. However, the meter image IM2 may have any configuration as long as it can suggest the current situation within a predetermined range.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image.
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation means.
The operating means can be operated in a specific operating direction,
An operation direction in which the operation unit image is displayed on the second display means, and the specific image is moved in a direction corresponding to the operation direction while the specific image is displayed on the first display means. Perform corresponding production,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
The operating means is a button.
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image moves in the vertical direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a meter image.
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the meter image changes according to the operation of the operation means by the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation method suggestion image suggesting an operation method of the operation means.
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the operation method suggestion image is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4.
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a character image.
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the character image is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5 is further described.
When the operation direction corresponding effect is being executed, the accessory located in front of at least a part of the first display means is provided.
A game machine characterized by that.

The image superimposition display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. This image superimposition display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image superimposition display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a and 7b.

[Image superimposition display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition display effect A. In the image superimposition display effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 104 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, which are corresponding backgrounds. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved images 9A, 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed on the second image display device 7B. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved images 9A, 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed dark together with the background image.

In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of image IM1s appear from the left and right sides of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the left and right ends of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is darkened.

Next, the image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, one or more image IM1s are displayed as if they overlap a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is difficult to see by the one or more images IM1. Further, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. After that, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable accessory 15 (whole movable accessory) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still. As a result, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image superimposition display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition display effect B. The image superimposition display effect B is different from the image superimposition display effect A of FIG. 104 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the movement mode of the image IM1. In the image appearance effect of FIG. 105 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the right side and the second image display device 7B is located on the left side, which are corresponding backgrounds. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed on the second image display device 7B. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed darkly together with the background image.

In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of image IM1s appear from the upper side of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the upper end of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the lower side of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is darkened.

Next, the image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, one or more image IM1s are displayed as if they overlap a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is difficult to see by the one or more images IM1. Further, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. After that, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 105 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable accessory 15 (whole movable accessory) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still. As a result, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image superimposition display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition display effect C. The image superimposition display effect C is different from the image superimposition display effect A of FIG. 104 in that a movable accessory is located in front of the image display device at the time of the image appearance effect. Here, it is assumed that the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advance position (deployment position). In the image appearance effect of FIG. 106 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, which are corresponding backgrounds. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved images 9A, 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed on the second image display device 7B. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed darkly together with the background image.

In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of image IM1s appear from the left and right sides of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). A specific object means everything that can be recognized as one independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the left and right ends of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen. A part of the image IM1 is made difficult to see due to the board movable body 15 (upper movable accessory). In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is darkened.

Next, the image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 106 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, one or more image IM1s are displayed as if they overlap a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is difficult to see by the one or more images IM1. Further, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. After that, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 106 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 106 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable accessory 15 (whole movable accessory) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stands still. As a result, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. At this time, in the board movable body 15, both the upper movable accessory and the entire movable accessory are in the advance position (deployment position).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image superimposition display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the first image display device 7A and the second image are displayed in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the second image display device 7B. An image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a circular figure) is displayed on the display device 7B, and the image IM1 performs the first effect of overlapping a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect. According to this configuration, since the image IM1 overlaps a part of the decorative pattern that has stopped fluctuating, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, in the first effect, the background images of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are changed correspondingly. According to this configuration, since the background image changes correspondingly, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, in the first effect, the image IM1 displayed on the first image display device 7A moves and at least a part of the image IM1 is the second image. It is displayed on the display device 7B. According to this configuration, since one or more images IM1 are displayed across the two display screens, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 106, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a board movable accessory 15 (whole movable accessory) that can advance to the front of each of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. After the first effect, the board movable accessory 15 performs the second effect of advancing to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, since a part of the two display screens is covered at the same time by one character effect, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the image superimposition display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are assumed to change correspondingly to the entire display screen. However, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may be changed in part of the display screen correspondingly.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, one or more image IM1s displayed on the second image display device 7B are assumed to overlap a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. However, a part of one or more images IM1 displayed on the second image display device 7B may overlap with the whole of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display screen 7a and one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7b are moved from one display screen to the other display screen. However, all the images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may move from one display screen to the other display screen. Further, the image IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b does not have to move from one display screen to the other display screen.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image representing a specific target.
One of the images displayed on the second display means is the specific image.
One of the images displayed on the second display means is a decorative pattern.
In a state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the second display means, the specific image is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, respectively, and the specific image is at least a part of the decorative symbol. Perform the first overlapping production,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine described in B3-1.
In the first effect, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-3]
B3-1 or B3-2.
In the first effect, at least a part of the background image of each of the first display means and the second display means changes correspondingly.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-3.
In the first effect, the specific image displayed on the first display means moves and at least a part of the specific image is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-4 is further described.
A movable accessory that can advance to the front of each of the first display means and the second display means is provided.
After the first effect, the movable accessory performs a second effect in which the movable accessory advances to the front of both the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

The special look-ahead effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111. This special look-ahead effect is an effect related to the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

[Special look-ahead production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the special look-ahead effect A.
First, in the special look-ahead effect A, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 107 (B) to 107 (D) below, the display effect related to the look-ahead effect is developed, but the look-ahead target hold of the look-ahead effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the fluctuation start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the first look-ahead start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is started. Further, in the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the second look-ahead start effect is executed. This second look-ahead start effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the first look-ahead start effect of FIG. 107 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second look-ahead start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the look-ahead symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second hold icon 9A is displayed. The look-ahead effect is started. The first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are continued until the change corresponding to the look-ahead target hold is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a look-ahead symbol as a second look-ahead effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect.

[Special look-ahead production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the special look-ahead effect B.
First, in the special look-ahead effect B, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In FIGS. 108 (B) to 108 (D) below, display effects related to the look-ahead effect are developed, but the look-ahead target hold of the look-ahead effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the first look-ahead start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is started. Further, in the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the second look-ahead start effect is executed. This second look-ahead start effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the first look-ahead start effect of FIG. 108 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second look-ahead start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the look-ahead symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second hold icon 9A is displayed. The look-ahead effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), the second look-ahead end effect is executed. This second look-ahead end effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the second look-ahead start effect of FIG. 108 (C) is performed. In the second look-ahead end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second look-ahead end effect, the image representing the look-ahead symbol in the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A is deleted on the display screen 7b, and the effect of returning to the original hold icon is performed. .. That is, in this second look-ahead end effect, the second look-ahead effect is completed and the first look-ahead effect is continued. The first look-ahead effect is continued until the change corresponding to the look-ahead target hold is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C is a normal hold icon without including an image representing the look-ahead symbol as the second look-ahead effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect.

[Special look-ahead production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the special look-ahead effect C.
First, in the special look-ahead effect C, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 109 (B) to 109 (D) below, the display effect related to the look-ahead effect is developed, but the look-ahead target hold of the look-ahead effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the fluctuation start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the first look-ahead start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is started. Further, in the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the second look-ahead start effect is executed. This second look-ahead start effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the first look-ahead start effect of FIG. 109 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second look-ahead start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the look-ahead symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second hold icon 9A is displayed. The look-ahead effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), the first look-ahead end effect is executed. This first look-ahead end effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the second look-ahead start effect of FIG. 109 (C) is performed. In the first look-ahead end effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped by the normal decorative symbols, and it is notified that the first look-ahead effect has ended. Further, in the first look-ahead end effect, the look-ahead symbol in the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. That is, in this first look-ahead end effect, the first look-ahead effect is completed and the second look-ahead effect is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a look-ahead symbol as a second look-ahead effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect.

[Special look-ahead production D]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the special look-ahead effect D.
First, in the special look-ahead effect D, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (D) below, the display effect related to the look-ahead effect is developed, but the look-ahead target hold of the look-ahead effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the fluctuation start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the first look-ahead start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is started. Further, in the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the second look-ahead start effect is executed. This second look-ahead start effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the first look-ahead start effect of FIG. 110 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a in the first look-ahead start effect are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7b. Is temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second look-ahead start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a in the first look-ahead start effect is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen. In 7a, an image representing the look-ahead symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second look-ahead effect is started. The first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are continued until the change corresponding to the look-ahead target hold is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7b, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a look-ahead symbol as a second look-ahead effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect.

[Special look-ahead production E]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the special look-ahead effect E.
This special look-ahead effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
First, in the special look-ahead effect E, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed. In addition, in FIGS. 111 (B) to 111 (D) below, the display effect related to the look-ahead effect is developed, but the look-ahead target hold of the look-ahead effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the fluctuation start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the first look-ahead start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, the first look-ahead effect is started, and the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C continue. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the second look-ahead start effect is executed. This second look-ahead start effect is an effect in the next variation of the variation in which the first look-ahead start effect of FIG. 111 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed, and the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A is supported. The hold icon is changed, an image representing the look-ahead symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second look-ahead effect is started. The first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are continued until the change corresponding to the look-ahead target hold is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a look-ahead symbol as a second look-ahead effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect.

The first look-ahead effect in the special look-ahead effects A to E is executed when the number of holds (the number of the first hold icons 9A) is a predetermined value or more (for example, 3 or more). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first look-ahead effect may be executed regardless of the number of reservations.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special look-ahead effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, in the special look-ahead effect, the second look-ahead effect is started after the first look-ahead effect is started. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, in the special look-ahead effect B, the second look-ahead effect is configured to end before the first look-ahead effect ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, in the special look-ahead effect C, the first look-ahead effect is configured to end before the second look-ahead effect ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, in the special look-ahead effects A to E, the first look-ahead effect is when the number of holds (the number of the first hold icons 9A) is equal to or more than a predetermined value. It is configured to start in. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, in the special look-ahead effects A to C, the first look-ahead effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and the second look-ahead effect is performed on the display screen 7b. It is configured to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the special look-ahead effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of special look-ahead effects A to E are implemented as special look-ahead effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns A to E are used. The production may be performed by combining the patterns.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special look-ahead effects A to E, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the special look-ahead effects A to E. Further, the special look-ahead effects A to E may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the special look-ahead effects A to E are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, in the special look-ahead effects A to D, the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are executed on different display screens, respectively. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect may be executed on the same display screen during or from the beginning.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special look-ahead effect A, after the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are started, these two look-ahead effects are completed until the fluctuations corresponding to the hold of the look-ahead target are reached. In the special look-ahead effect B or the special look-ahead effect C, after the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are started, one of the look-ahead effects is changed until the change corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. It is configured to end in. In these configurations, when the special look-ahead effect A appears, the jackpot expectation can be higher than when the special look-ahead effect B or the special look-ahead effect C appears. Alternatively, when the special look-ahead effect B or the special look-ahead effect C appears, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the special look-ahead effect A appears.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special look-ahead effect B, after the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are started, the second look-ahead effect ends before the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In the special look-ahead effect C, after the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect are started, the first look-ahead effect ends before the fluctuation corresponding to the look-ahead target hold. In these configurations, when the special look-ahead effect B appears in these configurations, the jackpot expectation can be higher than when the special look-ahead effect C appears. On the contrary, when the special look-ahead effect C appears, the jackpot expectation may be higher than that when the special look-ahead effect B appears.

[Modification 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special look-ahead effects A to D, the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect have the same look-ahead target hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited to this. The target hold may be different. For example, the look-ahead target hold of the first look-ahead effect may be a hold older than the look-ahead target hold of the second look-ahead effect, and the look-ahead target hold of the first look-ahead effect is from the look-ahead target hold of the second look-ahead effect. May also be a new hold.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a look-ahead effect of the first aspect as one of a plurality of look-ahead effects.
The second display effect is a look-ahead effect of the second aspect as one of a plurality of look-ahead effects.
The second display effect is started after the first display effect is started.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The second display effect may end before the end of the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The first display effect may end before the end of the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
The first display effect is executed when the number of holds is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means.
The first display effect is executed by the first display means, and the second display effect is executed by the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

The straddling reach effect and the music information display effect A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116. The straddle reach effect and the music information display effect are effects that can be performed while the decorative pattern is changing, during the demonstration screen (demo screen), or during the customer waiting screen.

[Straddle reach production]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining a straddling reach effect.
First, in the straddling effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, the reach state is represented by using decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. Further, in the reach effect B, the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect A.
First, in the music information display effect A, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the demo screen display effect is executed. In this demo screen display effect, the game information selection image B5A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The game information selection image B5A is an image for selecting one game information from a plurality of game information such as music information, light amount information, and volume information. Further, in this demo screen display effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, in other words, is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63. In this demo screen display effect, the player can select the music information of one of the game information selection images B5A by operating the effect button 63. The game information in the game information selection image B5A may include various information such as character information, game content information, and reach information in addition to music information, light intensity information, and volume information.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the music selection effect is executed. In this music selection effect, the music selection image B5B is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5B is an image for selecting one music information from a plurality of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. In this music selection effect, the player can select the music information of one of the music selection images B5B by operating the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the music determination effect is executed. In this music determination effect, the music image B5C is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5C is an image representing music information determined by the music selection effect.

[Music information display production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect B.
First, in the music information display effect B, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, the reach state is represented by using decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one music information from a plurality of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the player can select the music information of one of the music selection images B5D by operating the select button 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the music determination effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music determination effect during the reach effect, the music image B5E is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5E is an image representing music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in the music determination effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. Further, in the reach effect B, the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display production C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect C.
First, in the music information display effect C, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, the reach state is represented by using decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed on the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one music information from a plurality of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the player can select the music information of one of the music selection images B5D by operating the select button 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the music determination effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music determination effect during the reach production, the music image B5E is displayed on the display screen 7a. The music image B5E is an image representing music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in the music determination effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. Further, in the reach effect B, the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display production D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect D.
First, in the music information display effect B, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, the reach state is represented by using decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach effect A includes a normal reach effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be executed by developing from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the "6" symbol is in the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one music information from a plurality of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the music selection effect during the reach effect, the player can select the music information of one of the music selection images B5D by operating the select button 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), the music determination effect during the reach effect is executed. In the music determination effect during the reach effect, the music image B5E is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5E is an image representing music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in the music determination effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the ally character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the reach effect B is executed. In this reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. Further, in the reach effect B, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the straddle reach effect and the music information display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, a straddle reach effect using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and a music information display using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. It is possible to execute. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 114 and 116, in the music information display production, music information such as a music selection image and a music image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. It is configured to do. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112, 114 to 116, in the straddling reach effect or the music information display effect, the reach effect (friendly character CRA) straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. It is configured to be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, in the music information display production, the music information such as the music selection image and the music image is displayed during the reach production. .. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined in the music information display production, the player determines the music by the effect button 63 or the select button 68. It is configured to determine the music by operating. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the straddling reach effect and the music information display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, four patterns of music information display effects A to D are implemented as music information display effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and among A to D, the present invention is not limited to this. An effect that combines a plurality of patterns may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the straddle reach effect and the music information display effect A to D, but the present invention presents the present invention. It is not limited to this. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the straddle reach effect and the music information display effect A to D. Further, the reach effect and the music information display effects A to D may be performed while the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the straddling reach effect and the music information display effect A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A is the main display device, and the second image display device 7B is also the sub display device. Alternatively, the first image display device 7A may be the sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the straddling reach effect and the music information display effects A to D are performed, the decorative symbol used in the reach effect is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. May be good.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the music information display effects B to D, the music information such as the music selection image and the music image is displayed during the reach production. The effect is not limited, and music information such as a music selection image or a music image may be displayed during a fluctuation start production or a jackpot game.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the music information display effects A to D, when the music selection image is displayed to determine the music, the player operates the production button 63 or the select button 68 to determine the music. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined, the music may be determined by an arbitrary lottery or the like without the operation of the player.

[Modification 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the straddling reach effect or the music information display effect A to D has been executed by using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the straddle reach effect or the music information display effect A to D display screens 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of display devices (display screens) may be used for execution.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[B5-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects.
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a reach effect.
The second display effect is a music display effect that displays music information of the game.
The first display effect may be performed by using the first display means and the second display means.
The second display effect may be performed by using the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[B5-2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
In the second display effect, the music information is displayed across the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
In the first display effect, the reach effect is performed across the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

[B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
The second display effect is performed during the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
Equipped with an operation means that can accept the operation of the player
The second display effect is performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The straddling reach effect and the countdown effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 121. These effects are performed in parallel with the fluctuation of the effect symbols. The straddling reach effect is executed when the reach is formed by the effect symbol. The countdown effect is executed as a countdown to the reach effect and a countdown to the decision effect of the jackpot confirmation.

[Straddling reach production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the straddling reach effect A.
First, in the straddle reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed.

Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, the display device movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (C). In the display device movement effect, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B move in a direction in which they are close to each other (direction in which the overlap is large) and in a direction in which they are separated from each other (direction in which the overlap is small). And repeat.

[Straddling reach production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the straddling reach effect B.
First, in the straddle reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed.

Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, the symbol movement effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (C). In the symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A while rotating around the vertical axis as indicated by the arrows YG, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. ..

[Straddling reach production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the straddling reach effect C.
First, in the straddle reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed.

Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, the symbol movement effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (C). In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L and 8R are moved to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B and temporarily stopped and displayed as indicated by the arrows YG.

[Countdown production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect A.
First, in the countdown effect A, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

As one aspect following the fluctuation start effect, the count effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (B). In the count effect (1), the count image CG (“5” in FIG. 120 (B)) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. After that, the count image CG is displayed as "4"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1".

When the count image CG becomes “0”, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (C). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed.

[Countdown production B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect B.
First, in the countdown effect B, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the reach effect is executed following the fluctuation start effect. In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed.

As one aspect following the reach effect, the count effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 121 (B). In the count effect (2), the count image CG (“5” in FIG. 121 (B)) is displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, "straddling display" straddling the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is performed. After that, the count image CG is displayed as "4"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1".

When the count image CG becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the pattern matching effect is executed. In the symbol matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the straddling display straddling the display devices 7A and 7B is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 to 121, straddling display across the image display devices 7A and 7B is possible. Specifically, the reach effect (FIG. 117 (B), FIG. 118 (B), FIG. 119 (B), FIG. 120 (C), FIG. 121 (A)), the display device movement effect (FIG. 117 (C)). , The straddle display is performed in the count effect (2) (FIG. 121 (B)) and the pattern alignment effect (FIG. 121 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give power to the display of the numerical image in the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the display device movement effect is executed. In the display device movement effect, the two display devices 7A and 7B repeat the movement in the direction in which they are close to each other (the direction in which the overlap is large) and the movement in the direction in which they are separated from each other (the direction in which the overlap is small). According to this configuration, it is possible to give power to the display of the numerical image in combination with the straddle display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach effect (FIG. 117 (B), FIG. 118 (B), FIG. 119 (B), FIG. 120 (C), FIG. 121 (A)), the display device movement effect (FIG. 117). (C)), in the pattern matching effect (FIG. 121 (C)), the effect symbols are straddled and displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give power to the display of the effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the straddle display is performed for the reach effect (FIGS. 117 (B), 118 (B), 119 (B), 120 (C), 121 (A)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give power to the reach production and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the symbol movement effect is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), as shown in FIG. 118 (C), the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed by the first image display device 7A while rotating around the axis in the vertical direction as shown by the arrows YG. It moves to the screen 7a and a temporary stop is displayed. In the symbol movement effect (2), as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B and are temporarily stopped as shown by the arrows YG. Will be done. According to this configuration, since the effect symbol moves after being straddled, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the count image CG is straddled and displayed in the count effect (2) (FIG. 121 (B)). As a result, the count effect (2) can be made more powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), in the count effect (1), the count image CG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the count effect (2), the count image CG is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B ( Straddle display). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a range to the counting effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
An example of modification in this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 to 121, the straddle display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the straddle display of the count image CG are given as examples, but the present invention describes the present invention. It is not limited to this. Since the display may be a straddle display of a numerical image, for example, the number of acquired balls (including a numerical value based on the number of balls), the number of consecutive villas, the number of prize balls, the number of rounds, etc. may be displayed straddle as a numerical image.

[Modification 2]
As shown in FIGS. 117 to 121, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration including a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to include three or more image display devices. At this time, the straddle display may be performed across the display screens of three or more image display devices.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are moved in the vertical direction so as to overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to move in a left-right direction or an oblique direction. Further, three or more display devices may be configured to move so as to change their relative positions to each other.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
Multiple display devices that can display numeric images,
A gaming machine including a display control means for displaying the numerical image on the display device.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the numerical image can be displayed across the plurality of display devices.

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
Further, a drive control means capable of moving the plurality of display devices and changing the relative position of the display devices is provided.
The drive control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the relative position of the display device can be changed in parallel with the straddle display by the display control means.

[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it enables the straddle display when temporarily stopping the effect symbol as the numerical image.

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that a temporary stop display of the effect symbol by the straddle display is performed at the time of reach effect.

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3 or aspect B6-4.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, following a temporary stop display of the effect symbol by the straddle display, the effect symbol is moved to one of the plurality of display devices.

[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it enables the straddle display in a count display for displaying the numerical images in a predetermined order.

[Aspect B6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-6.
The display control means is characterized in that it can perform a first count display in which the count display is performed by the straddle display and a second count display in which the count display is performed by any one of the plurality of display devices. A game machine to play.

Hereinafter, the disparity loss effect, the normal reach loss effect, and the symbol promotion display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126. These effects are performed in parallel with the variable display of the effect symbols. The loose effect is a loss effect when the effect symbol stops without forming a reach. The normal reach loss effect is a loss effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach and then stops without developing into SP reach or the like. The symbol promotion display effect is an effect of whether or not to promote to a probabilistic symbol after the jackpot is confirmed.

[Rose loss production]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the dislocation effect.
First, in the disparity effect, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, the middle symbol variation effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 122 (B). In the middle symbol variation effect (1), the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A without forming a reach, and are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the dislocation confirmation effect is executed. In the disparity confirmation effect, after the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a confirmed stop.

[Normal reach loss production A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach loss effect A.
In the normal reach loss effect A, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the variation start effect, the middle symbol variation effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 123 (A). In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the effect symbol, which is the middle symbol, is variablely displayed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and then it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the middle symbol temporary stop effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol temporary stop effect (1), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, whereas the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is provisionally displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Stop is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), the middle symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B moves to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by an arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Normal reach loss production B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach loss effect B.
In the normal reach loss effect B, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the variation start effect, the middle symbol variation effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 124 (A). In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the effect symbol, which is the middle symbol, is variablely displayed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and then it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the middle symbol temporary stop effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol temporary stop effect (2), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, whereas the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is displayed on the display screens 7a and the first image display device 7A. 2 The image is displayed across the display screen 7b of the image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b in the "straddling display".

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the middle symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the straddle display mode moves to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by the arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design promotion display production A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the symbol promotion display effect A.
In the symbol promotion display effect A, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the fluctuation start effect, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), a symbol matching effect indicating a jackpot is executed. In the symbol matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the symbol promotion effect (1) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small as if they were moved to the back of the display screen, and then moved forward again. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as if they were heading. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b, which is a "straddling display". In addition, there are cases where the symbol is promoted to a probabilistic symbol and cases where the original symbol remains without being promoted. FIG. 125 (B) shows how the symbol was promoted to “7”, which is a probabilistic symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the straddle display mode are moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by the arrows YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Design promotion display production B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the symbol promotion display effect B.
In the symbol promotion display effect B, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the fluctuation start effect, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), a symbol matching effect indicating a jackpot is executed. In the symbol matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), the symbol promotion effect (2) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small as if they were moved to the back of the display screen, and then moved forward again. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as if they were heading. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b, which is a "straddling display". Moreover, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are large symbols stretched in the vertical direction, and occupy most of the display screens 7a and 7b. In addition, there are cases where the symbol is promoted to a probabilistic symbol and cases where the original symbol remains without being promoted. FIG. 126 (B) shows how the symbol was promoted to “7”, which is a probabilistic symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), the symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the straddle display mode are moved to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B as indicated by the arrows YG. Then, on the display screen 7b, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect in this embodiment is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 to 126, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped while the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Display and then move to the other. Further, the effect symbol is displayed straddling the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, and then moved to one of the display screens 7a and 7b. According to this configuration, in the variable display of the effect symbol, the temporary stop display can be changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), after the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, FIG. 123 (C) ), The effect symbol 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A to display a fixed stop display. Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is displayed straddling the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. As shown in 124 (C), the effect symbol 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A to display a fixed stop display. According to this configuration, the temporary stop display of the middle symbol at the time of normal reach can be changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (A) and 124 (A), the effect symbols that are the middle symbols are the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device. The display is variable across the display screen 7b of 7B. According to this configuration, as compared with the disparity effect shown in FIG. 122, the fluctuation of the middle symbol after the reach formation becomes dynamic, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and moved are three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that indicate a jackpot. According to this configuration, the display of the effect symbol at the time of a big hit becomes a powerful display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 (B) and 126 (B), the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display of the second image display device 7B are displayed during the symbol promotion effect. A straddle display is performed over the screen 7b, and then the display is moved to either the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A or the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, the symbol promotion display effect at the time of a big hit becomes a powerful display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
An example of modification in this embodiment is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 126, the normal reach loss effect and the symbol promotion display effect have been described as examples. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied not only to the normal reach loss effect but also to stop the changing effect symbols such as the normal reach loss effect, the SP reach loss effect, the SP reach loss effect, and the disjoint effect.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (B), 123 (C), 124 (B) and 124 (C), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 8C which is the middle symbol and the temporary stop display and The subsequent movement was explained. On the other hand, if the effect symbol to be stopped third is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be temporarily stopped and then moved.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (A) and 124 (A), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, fluctuates across the display screens 7a and 7b. On the other hand, if the third stop effect symbol is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be configured to fluctuate across the display screens 7a and 7b.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the symbol promotion display effect has been described as an example. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot determination effect, the three effect symbols may be straddled and then moved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
Multiple display devices that can display the production design and
A game machine provided with a display control means for displaying the effect symbol on the display device.
In the temporary stop display of the effect symbol, the display control means displays the effect symbol straddling the first image display device or the first image display device and the second image display device, and then displays the effect symbol on the effect. A gaming machine characterized by moving to a second image display device and performing a fixed stop display.

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1.
The effect symbol is a gaming machine characterized in that it is the remaining one final stop effect symbol when reach is formed by two effect symbols.

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2.
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, when the reach is formed, the final stop effect symbol is variablely displayed across the first image display device and the second image display device.

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1.
The effect symbol is a gaming machine characterized in that it is three jackpot effect symbols indicating that it has become a jackpot.

[Aspect B7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-4.
The display control means changes the jackpot effect symbol to the probability variation jackpot effect symbol when promoting to the probability variation jackpot effect symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, or performs the straddle display without changing the change, and then performs the straddle display. A gaming machine characterized by moving to the second image display device and performing a fixed stop display.

[Other variants]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects using the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) have been described. However, in these effects, a predetermined character , Decorative design, hold icon, button image BTN, or select button image BTNS moves from display screen 7a to display screen 7b, moves from display screen 7b to display screen 7a, displays screen 7a and display screen 7b. It may be displayed across the.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 64. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the time is represented by using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display, but the time is not limited to this, and the time may be represented by the meter method or the indicator method as the timer display.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-mentioned display effect may be executed on the sub-display device.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect can be modified or improved without departing from its purpose and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 9A ... 1st hold icon 9B ... 1st hold icon 9C ... 2nd hold icon 15 ... Board movable body 20 ... 1st start port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd entry port)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

Multiple display devices that can display the production design and
A game machine provided with a display control means for displaying the effect symbol on the display device.
The display control means temporarily stops the remaining one final stop effect symbol when the reach is formed by the two effect symbols, or the three jackpot effect symbols indicating that the jackpot has been achieved as the effect symbol. The first effect to be caused is executed, the second effect is executed to display as if the display is reduced and moved backward from the normal time following the first effect, and the second effect is subsequently expanded. A third effect is executed in which the display is displayed as if it has moved forward and the display is temporarily stopped so as to straddle the first display device and the second display device, and the third effect is followed by the third effect. The fourth effect of moving the effect symbol to the second display device and performing a fixed stop display is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images